forksand
/
qmk_firmware
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Releases Wiki Activity

Moved all source to the trunk directory.

Browse Source
pull/1469/head
Dean Camera 17 years ago
parent 4bc7e909f9
commit c1a1b6eeec
25 changed files with 9633 additions and 0 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File

1
Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>BootloaderCDC</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:20:09</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:20:30</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:20:09</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile>BootloaderCDC.elf</ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>BootloaderCDC.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>BootloaderCDC.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>BootloaderCDC.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><ProjectFiles><Files><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.c</Name></Files></ProjectFiles><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>

570
Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,570 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
*/
#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C
#include "BootloaderCDC.h"
/* Globals: */
/** Line coding options for the virtual serial port. Although the virtual serial port data is never
* sent through a physical serial port, the line encoding data must still be read and preserved from
* the host, or the host will detect a problem and fail to open the port. This structure contains the
* current encoding options, including baud rate, character format, parity mode and total number of
* bits in each data chunk.
*/
CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
CharFormat: OneStopBit,
ParityType: Parity_None,
DataBits: 8 };
/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host,
* and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued
* command.)
*/
uint16_t CurrAddress;
/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
* via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
* jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000.
*/
bool RunBootloader = true;
/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
* runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
* the loaded application code.
*/
int main(void)
{
/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
wdt_disable();
/* Disable Clock Division */
SetSystemClockPrescaler(0);
/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
/* Initialize USB Subsystem */
USB_Init();
while (RunBootloader)
{
USB_USBTask();
CDC_Task();
}
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
/* Wait until any pending transmissions have completed before shutting down */
while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
/* Shut down the USB subsystem */
USB_ShutDown();
/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
MCUCR = 0;
/* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */
PORTD = 0;
DDRD = 0;
#if defined(PORTE)
PORTE = 0;
DDRE = 0;
#endif
/* Re-enable RWW section */
boot_rww_enable();
/* Start the user application */
AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
AppStartPtr();
}
/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user
* application started.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
{
/* Upon disconnection, run user application */
RunBootloader = false;
}
/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
* to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
{
/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
}
/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
* control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately
* for the application.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
{
uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
Endpoint_Discard_Word();
/* Process CDC specific control requests */
switch (bRequest)
{
case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(LineCodingData++));
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
}
break;
case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
*(LineCodingData++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
}
break;
case REQ_SetControlLineState:
if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
}
break;
}
}
/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending
* on the AVR910 protocol command issued.
*
* \param Command Single character AVR910 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform
*/
static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command)
{
uint16_t BlockSize;
char MemoryType;
bool HighByte = false;
uint8_t LowByte = 0;
BlockSize = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
BlockSize |= FetchNextCommandByte();
MemoryType = FetchNextCommandByte();
if ((MemoryType == 'E') || (MemoryType == 'F'))
{
/* Check if command is to read memory */
if (Command == 'g')
{
/* Re-enable RWW section */
boot_rww_enable();
while (BlockSize--)
{
if (MemoryType == 'E')
{
/* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */
WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress));
/* Increment the address counter after use */
CurrAddress++;
}
else
{
/* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */
#if defined(RAMPZ)
WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte));
#else
WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte((CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte));
#endif
/* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */
if (HighByte)
CurrAddress++;
HighByte ^= 1;
}
}
}
else
{
uint32_t PageStartAddress = ((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1);
if (MemoryType == 'F')
{
boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
}
while (BlockSize--)
{
if (MemoryType == 'E')
{
/* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */
eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
/* Increment the address counter after use */
CurrAddress++;
}
else
{
/* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */
if (HighByte)
{
/* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */
boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte));
HighByte = false;
/* Increment the address counter after use */
CurrAddress++;
}
else
{
LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte();
HighByte = true;
}
}
}
/* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */
if (MemoryType == 'F')
{
/* Commit the flash page to memory */
boot_page_write(PageStartAddress);
/* Wait until write operation has completed */
boot_spm_busy_wait();
}
/* Send response byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
}
else
{
/* Send error byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('?');
}
}
/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed
* to allow reception of the next data packet from the host.
*
* \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint
*/
static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void)
{
/* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
{
Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
}
/* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */
return Endpoint_Read_Byte();
}
/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the
* bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host.
*
* \param Response Next response byte to send to the host
*/
static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response)
{
/* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
{
Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
}
/* Write the next byte to the OUT endpoint */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(Response);
}
/** Task to read in AVR910 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions
* and send the appropriate response back to the host.
*/
TASK(CDC_Task)
{
/* Select the OUT endpoint */
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
/* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */
if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
{
/* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */
uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte();
if ((Command == 'L') || (Command == 'P') || (Command == 'T') || (Command == 'E'))
{
if (Command == 'E')
RunBootloader = false;
if (Command == 'T')
FetchNextCommandByte();
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 't')
{
/* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */
WriteNextResponseByte(0x44);
WriteNextResponseByte(0x00);
}
else if (Command == 'a')
{
/* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */
WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
}
else if (Command == 'A')
{
/* Set the current address to that given by the host */
CurrAddress = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
CurrAddress |= FetchNextCommandByte();
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 'p')
{
/* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('S');
}
else if (Command == 'S')
{
/* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */
for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++)
WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]);
}
else if (Command == 'V')
{
WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR);
WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR);
}
else if (Command == 's')
{
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(4));
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(2));
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(0));
}
else if (Command == 'b')
{
WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
/* Send block size to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8);
WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF);
}
else if (Command == 'e')
{
/* Clear the application section of flash */
for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress++)
{
boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
}
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 'l')
{
/* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */
boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte());
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 'r')
{
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS));
}
else if (Command == 'F')
{
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS));
}
else if (Command == 'N')
{
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS));
}
else if (Command == 'Q')
{
WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS));
}
else if ((Command == 'C') || (Command == 'c'))
{
if (Command == 'c')
{
/* Increment the address if the second byte is being written */
CurrAddress++;
}
/* Write the high byte to the current flash page */
boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), FetchNextCommandByte());
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 'm')
{
/* Commit the flash page to memory */
boot_page_write((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1);
/* Wait until write operation has completed */
boot_spm_busy_wait();
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if ((Command == 'B') || (Command == 'g'))
{
/* Delegate the block write/read to a seperate function for clarity */
ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command);
}
else if (Command == 'R')
{
#if defined(RAMPZ)
uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1));
#else
uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress << 1);
#endif
WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8);
WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF);
}
else if (Command == 'D')
{
/* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */
eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
/* Increment the address after use */
CurrAddress++;
/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
}
else if (Command == 'd')
{
/* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */
WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress));
/* Increment the address after use */
CurrAddress++;
}
else if (Command == 27)
{
/* Escape is sync, ignore */
}
else
{
/* Unknown command, return fail code */
WriteNextResponseByte('?');
}
/* Select the IN endpoint */
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
/* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */
bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed());
/* Send the endpoint data to the host */
Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
/* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */
if (IsEndpointFull)
{
while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
}
/* Select the OUT endpoint */
Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
/* Acknowledge the command from the host */
Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
}
}

135
Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for BootloaderCDC.c.
*/
#ifndef _CDC_H_
#define _CDC_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <avr/io.h>
#include <avr/wdt.h>
#include <avr/boot.h>
#include <avr/eeprom.h>
#include <stdbool.h>
#include "Descriptors.h"
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
/* Macros: */
/** CDC Class Specific request to get the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
* baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
*/
#define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21
/** CDC Class Specific request to set the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
* baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
*/
#define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20
/** CDC Class Specific request to set the state of the serial handshake lines (such as DCD and RTS) on
* a CDC-ACM virtual serial port.
*/
#define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22
/** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01
/** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 0x00
/** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR 0x01
/** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR 0x00
/** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested */
#define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER "LUFA-CDC"
/* Event Handlers: */
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
/* Type Defines: */
/** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */
typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
/** Type define for the CDC-ACM virtual serial port line encoding options, including baud rate, format, parity
* and size of each data chunk in bits.
*/
typedef struct
{
uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate in BPS */
uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum */
uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity mode, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t enum */
uint8_t DataBits; /**< Size of each data chunk, in bits */
} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
/* Enums: */
/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
{
OneStopBit = 0, /**< Single stop bit */
OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< 1.5 stop bits */
TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Two stop bits */
};
/** Enum for the possible parity modes on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t
{
Parity_None = 0, /**< No data parity checking */
Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd data parity checking */
Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even data parity checking */
Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark data parity checking */
Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space data parity checking */
};
/* Tasks: */
TASK(CDC_Task);
/* Function Prototypes: */
#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command);
static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void);
static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response);
#endif
#endif

40
Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
/** \file
*
* This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
* documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
*/
/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader
*
* This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109
* protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR.
*
* Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
* you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
* values in the accompanying makefile.
*
* This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, or Atmel's AVRPROG.
*
* <table>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
* <td>Device</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
* <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
* <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
* <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
* <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
* </tr>
* </table>
*/

247
Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
* computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
* the device's capabilities and functions.
*/
#include "Descriptors.h"
/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
* device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
* number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
* process begins.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
Class: 0x02,
SubClass: 0x00,
Protocol: 0x00,
Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
VendorID: 0x03EB,
ProductID: 0x204A,
ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ProductStrIndex: 0x01,
SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
NumberOfConfigurations: 1
};
/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
* of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
* and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
* a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
{
Config:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
TotalInterfaces: 2,
ConfigurationNumber: 1,
ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
},
CCI_Interface:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
InterfaceNumber: 0,
AlternateSetting: 0,
TotalEndpoints: 1,
Class: 0x02,
SubClass: 0x02,
Protocol: 0x01,
InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
},
CDC_Functional_IntHeader:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
SubType: 0x00,
Data: {0x10, 0x01}
},
CDC_Functional_CallManagement:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
SubType: 0x01,
Data: {0x03, 0x01}
},
CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
SubType: 0x02,
Data: {0x06}
},
CDC_Functional_Union:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
SubType: 0x06,
Data: {0x00, 0x01}
},
ManagementEndpoint:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
},
DCI_Interface:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
InterfaceNumber: 1,
AlternateSetting: 0,
TotalEndpoints: 2,
Class: 0x0A,
SubClass: 0x00,
Protocol: 0x00,
InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
},
DataOutEndpoint:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
},
DataInEndpoint:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
}
};
/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
* the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
* via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
};
/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
* and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
* Descriptor.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: L"AVR CDC Bootloader"
};
/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
* documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
* to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
* is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
* USB host.
*/
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
{
const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
void* Address = NULL;
uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
switch (DescriptorType)
{
case DTYPE_Device:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
break;
case DTYPE_Configuration:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
break;
case DTYPE_String:
if (!(DescriptorNumber))
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
Size = LanguageString.Header.Size;
}
else
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
Size = ProductString.Header.Size;
}
break;
}
*DescriptorAddress = Address;
return Size;
}

95
Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for Descriptors.c.
*/
#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
/* Macros: */
/** Structure for a CDC class Functional descriptor, with a given data size. This is used instead of a
* type define so that the same macro can be used for functional descriptors of varying data lengths,
* while allowing the sizeof() operator to return correct results.
*
* \param DataSize Size of the functional descriptor's data payload, in bytes
*/
#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \
struct \
{ \
USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \
uint8_t SubType; \
uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \
}
/** Endpoint number for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */
#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3
/** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes */
#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint */
#define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1
/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint */
#define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2
/** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes */
#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16
/* Type Defines: */
/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
* application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
* vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
*/
typedef struct
{
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface;
CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement;
CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union;
USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint;
USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface;
USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint;
USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint;
} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
/* Function Prototypes: */
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
#endif

1485
Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
#
# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
# The format is:
# TAG = value [value, ...]
# For lists items can also be appended using:
# TAG += value [value, ...]
# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Project related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
# by quotes) that should identify the project.
PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader"
# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
# if some version control system is used.
PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
# Set to NO to disable this.
BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
"The $name widget" \
"The $name file" \
is \
provides \
specifies \
contains \
represents \
a \
an \
the
# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
# description.
ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
# path to strip.
STRIP_FROM_PATH =
# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
SHORT_NAMES = YES
# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
# re-implements.
INHERIT_DOCS = YES
# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
TAB_SIZE = 4
# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
ALIASES =
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
# of all members will be omitted, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
# scopes will look different, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Fortran.
OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
# VHDL.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
# enable parsing support.
CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
SIP_SUPPORT = NO
# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
# the \nosubgrouping command.
SUBGROUPING = YES
# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
# causing a significant performance penality.
# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Build related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
EXTRACT_ALL = YES
# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
# the interface are included in the documentation.
# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
# anonymous namespace are hidden.
EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
# documentation.
HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
# function's detailed documentation block.
HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
# of that file.
SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
INLINE_INFO = YES
# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
# the group names will appear in their defined order.
SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
# not including the namespace part.
# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
# alphabetical list.
SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
ENABLED_SECTIONS =
# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
# in the documentation. The default is NO.
SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_FILES = YES
# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
# of the layout file.
LAYOUT_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
QUIET = YES
# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
# NO is used.
WARNINGS = YES
# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
# automatically be disabled.
WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
# documentation.
WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
# to stderr.
WARN_LOGFILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the input files
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
# with spaces.
INPUT = ./
# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
# the list of possible encodings.
INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank the following patterns are tested:
# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
*.c \
*.txt
# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
# If left blank NO is used.
RECURSIVE = YES
# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
EXCLUDE =
# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
# from the input.
EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
# for example use the pattern */test/*
EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
# the \include command).
EXAMPLE_PATH =
# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank all files are included.
EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
# the \image command).
IMAGE_PATH =
# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
# ignored.
INPUT_FILTER =
# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
# is applied to all files.
FILTER_PATTERNS =
# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to source browsing
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
INLINE_SOURCES = NO
# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented
# functions referencing it will be listed.
REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented entities
# called/used by that function will be listed.
REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
USE_HTAGS = NO
# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
IGNORE_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the HTML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate HTML output.
GENERATE_HTML = YES
# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
HTML_OUTPUT = html
# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header.
HTML_HEADER =
# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard footer.
HTML_FOOTER =
# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
HTML_STYLESHEET =
# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
# NO a bullet list will be used.
HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
# it at startup.
# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
# can be grouped.
DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
# will append .docset to the name.
DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
# of the generated HTML documentation.
GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
# written to the html output directory.
CHM_FILE =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
HHC_LOCATION =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
GENERATE_CHI = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
# content.
CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
BINARY_TOC = NO
# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
TOC_EXPAND = YES
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
# HTML documentation.
GENERATE_QHP = NO
# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
QCH_FILE =
# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
# .qhp file .
QHG_LOCATION =
# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
# the value YES disables it.
DISABLE_INDEX = NO
# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
# respectively.
GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
# is shown.
TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
# to force them to be regenerated.
FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate Latex output.
GENERATE_LATEX = NO
# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
# default command name.
MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_LATEX = NO
# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
EXTRA_PACKAGES =
# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
LATEX_HEADER =
# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
# higher quality PDF documentation.
USE_PDFLATEX = YES
# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
# in the output.
LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the RTF output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
# other RTF readers or editors.
GENERATE_RTF = NO
# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_RTF = NO
# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
# programs which support those fields.
# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the man page output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate man pages
GENERATE_MAN = NO
# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
MAN_OUTPUT = man
# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
MAN_EXTENSION = .3
# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
MAN_LINKS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the XML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation.
GENERATE_XML = NO
# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
XML_OUTPUT = xml
# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_SCHEMA =
# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_DTD =
# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
# that captures the structure of the code including all
# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
# and incomplete at the moment.
GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the Perl module output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation. Note that this
# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
# moment.
GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
# and Perl will parse it just the same.
PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
# files.
ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
# the preprocessor.
INCLUDE_PATH =
# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
# be used.
INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
# instead of the = operator.
PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
# the parser if not removed.
SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to external references
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
# this location is as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
# does not have to be run to correct the links.
# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
# (where the name does NOT include the path)
# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
TAGFILES =
# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
GENERATE_TAGFILE =
# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
# will be listed.
ALLEXTERNALS = NO
# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
# be listed.
EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the dot tool
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
# powerful graphs.
CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
# default search path.
MSCGEN_PATH =
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
# or is not a class.
HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
HAVE_DOT = NO
# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
# containing the font.
DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
# The default size is 10pt.
DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
# can find it using this tag.
DOT_FONTPATH =
# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
CLASS_GRAPH = NO
# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
# Language.
UML_LOOK = NO
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
# relations between templates and their instances.
TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
# other documented files.
INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
# indirectly include this file.
INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
CALL_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
CALLER_GRAPH = NO
# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
# relations between the files in the directories.
DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
# If left blank png will be used.
DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
# \dotfile command).
DOTFILE_DIRS =
# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
# the various graphs.
DOT_CLEANUP = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
SEARCHENGINE = NO

55
Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File
; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
[Version]
Signature="$Windows NT$"
Class=Ports
ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
Provider=%COMPANY%
LayoutFile=layout.inf
DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0
[Manufacturer]
%MFGNAME% = ManufName
[DestinationDirs]
DefaultDestDir=12
[ManufName]
%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
; Windows 2000/XP Sections
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Modem3.nt]
CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection
AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg
[USBModemCopyFileSection]
usbser.sys,,,0x20
[Modem3.nt.AddReg]
HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys
HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
[Modem3.nt.Services]
AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService
[DriverService]
DisplayName=%SERVICE%
ServiceType=1
StartType=3
ErrorControl=1
ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
; String Definitions
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Strings]
COMPANY="LUFA Library"
MFGNAME="Dean Camera"
Modem3="USB AVR109 Bootloader"
SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver"

711
Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,711 @@
# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
#
# Released to the Public Domain
#
# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
# Peter Fleury
# Tim Henigan
# Colin O'Flynn
# Reiner Patommel
# Markus Pfaff
# Sander Pool
# Frederik Rouleau
# Carlos Lamas
# Dean Camera
# Opendous Inc.
# Denver Gingerich
#
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# On command line:
#
# make all = Make software.
#
# make clean = Clean out built project files.
#
# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
#
# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
#
# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
#
# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
# have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
# have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
# DoxyGen installed)
#
# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
#
# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
#
# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
# bug reports to the GCC project.
#
# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# MCU name
MCU = at90usb1287
# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
# "Board" inside the application directory.
BOARD = USBKEY
# Processor frequency.
# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
# Typical values are:
# F_CPU = 1000000
# F_CPU = 1843200
# F_CPU = 2000000
# F_CPU = 3686400
# F_CPU = 4000000
# F_CPU = 7372800
# F_CPU = 8000000
# F_CPU = 11059200
# F_CPU = 14745600
# F_CPU = 16000000
# F_CPU = 18432000
# F_CPU = 20000000
F_CPU = 8000000
# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
FORMAT = ihex
# Target file name (without extension).
TARGET = BootloaderCDC
# Object files directory
# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
# this an empty or blank macro!
OBJDIR = .
# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
SRC = $(TARGET).c \
Descriptors.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
CPPSRC =
# List Assembler source files here.
# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
ASRC =
# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
OPT = s
# Debugging format.
# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
DEBUG = dwarf-2
# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../
# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
# c89 = "ANSI" C
# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
# Starting byte address of the bootloader
BOOT_START = 0x1E000
# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION
CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION
# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder
CFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
CPPFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns: create listing
# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
#---------------- Library Options ----------------
# Minimalistic printf version
PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
PRINTF_LIB =
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
# Minimalistic scanf version
SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
SCANF_LIB =
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
MATH_LIB = -lm
# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRALIBDIRS =
#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# only used for heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
EXTMEMOPTS =
#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
# -Map: create map file
# --cref: add cross reference to map file
LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
#
# Type: avrdude -c ?
# to get a full listing.
#
AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
# see avrdude manual.
#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
# performed after programming the device.
#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
# to submit bug reports.
#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
# DEBUG_UI = gdb
DEBUG_UI = insight
# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
# GDB Init Filename.
GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
DEBUG_PORT = 4242
# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
# avarice is running on a different computer.
DEBUG_HOST = localhost
#============================================================================
# Define programs and commands.
SHELL = sh
CC = avr-gcc
OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
SIZE = avr-size
AR = avr-ar rcs
NM = avr-nm
AVRDUDE = avrdude
REMOVE = rm -f
REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
COPY = cp
WINSHELL = cmd
# Define Messages
# English
MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
MSG_END = -------- end --------
MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
MSG_LINKING = Linking:
MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
# Define all object files.
OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
# Define all listing files.
LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
# Add target processor to flags.
ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
# Default target.
all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end
# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
build: elf hex eep lss sym
#build: lib
elf: $(TARGET).elf
hex: $(TARGET).hex
eep: $(TARGET).eep
lss: $(TARGET).lss
sym: $(TARGET).sym
LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
lib: $(LIBNAME)
# Eye candy.
# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
begin:
@echo
@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
end:
@echo $(MSG_END)
@echo
# Display size of file.
HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
sizebefore:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
sizeafter:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
checkhooks: build
@echo
@echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
@$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
echo "(None)"
@echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events -----
checklibmode:
@echo
@echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
@$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
| grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
|| echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
@echo ------------------------------------
# Display compiler version information.
gccversion :
@$(CC) --version
# Program the device.
program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
flip: $(TARGET).hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu: $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
# a breakpoint at main().
gdb-config:
@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
@echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
endif
@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
else
@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
endif
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
coff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
%.hex: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
%.eep: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
%.lss: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
%.sym: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
$(NM) -n $< > $@
# Create library from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.a: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.elf: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
# Compile: create object files from C source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
%.s : %.c
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
%.s : %.cpp
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
@echo
@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
%.i : %.c
$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Target: clean project.
clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
clean_binary:
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
clean_list:
@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
doxygen:
@echo Generating Project Documentation...
@doxygen Doxygen.conf
@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
clean_doxygen:
rm -rf Documentation
# Create object files directory
$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
# Include the dependency files.
-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
# Listing of phony targets.
.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \
finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \
gdb-config doxygen

1
Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>BootloaderDFU</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:20:47</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:21:00</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:20:47</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\DFU\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM></COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>BootloaderDFU.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>BootloaderDFU.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>BootloaderDFU.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>

692
Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,692 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
*/
/** Configuration define. Define this token to true to case the bootloader to reject all memory commands
* until a memory erase has been performed. When used in conjunction with the lockbits of the AVR, this
* can protect the AVR's firmware from being dumped from a secured AVR. When false, memory operations are
* allowed at any time.
*/
#define SECURE_MODE false
#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C
#include "BootloaderDFU.h"
/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations
* other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader
* once a memory erase has completed.
*/
bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE;
/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
* via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
* jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host).
*/
bool RunBootloader = true;
/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and
* jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly
* acknowedged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set,
* causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down.
*/
bool WaitForExit = false;
/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */
uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after
* each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued.
*/
uint8_t DFU_Status = OK;
/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */
DFU_Command_t SentCommand;
/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command
* requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command
* is issued by the host.
*/
uint8_t ResponseByte;
/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host
* may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command.
*/
AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than
* 64KB of flash memory.
*/
uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0;
/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM
* depending on the issued command from the host).
*/
uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000;
/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read to/write from in the memory being addressed (either FLASH
* of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host).
*/
uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000;
/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
* runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
* the loaded application code.
*/
int main (void)
{
/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
wdt_disable();
/* Disable Clock Division */
SetSystemClockPrescaler(0);
/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
/* Initialize the USB subsystem */
USB_Init();
/* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */
while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit)
USB_USBTask();
/* Shut down the USB subsystem */
USB_ShutDown();
/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
MCUCR = 0;
/* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */
PORTD = 0;
DDRD = 0;
#if defined(PORTE)
PORTE = 0;
DDRE = 0;
#endif
/* Start the user application */
AppStartPtr();
}
/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user
* application started.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
{
/* Upon disconnection, run user application */
RunBootloader = false;
}
/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
* control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the DFU commands, which are
* all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
{
/* Discard unused wIndex value */
Endpoint_Discard_Word();
/* Discard unused wValue value */
Endpoint_Discard_Word();
/* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */
SentCommand.DataSize = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
switch (bRequest)
{
case DFU_DNLOAD:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */
if (WaitForExit)
{
/* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */
ProcessBootloaderCommand();
/* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */
WaitForExit = false;
}
/* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */
if (SentCommand.DataSize)
{
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
/* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */
SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
/* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */
SentCommand.DataSize--;
/* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */
for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) &&
Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++)
{
SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
SentCommand.DataSize--;
}
/* Process the command */
ProcessBootloaderCommand();
}
/* Check if currently downloading firmware */
if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE)
{
if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
{
DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
}
else
{
/* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE);
/* Throw away the page alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % SPM_PAGESIZE);
/* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */
uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Write flash
{
/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
union
{
uint16_t Words[2];
uint32_t Long;
} CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
uint8_t WordsInFlashPage = 0;
while (WordsRemaining--)
{
/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
}
/* Write the next word into the current flash page */
boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
/* Adjust counters */
WordsInFlashPage += 1;
CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
/* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */
if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining))
{
/* Commit the flash page to memory */
boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
/* Check if programming incomplete */
if (WordsRemaining)
{
CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
WordsInFlashPage = 0;
/* Erase next page's temp buffer */
boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
}
}
}
/* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */
StartAddr = EndAddr;
/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */
boot_rww_enable();
}
else // Write EEPROM
{
while (BytesRemaining--)
{
/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
}
/* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */
eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_Byte());
/* Adjust counters */
StartAddr++;
}
}
/* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */
DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE);
}
}
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
/* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
break;
case DFU_UPLOAD:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE)
{
if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank Check
{
/* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host
that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */
Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(StartAddr);
}
else
{
/* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseByte);
}
}
else
{
/* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */
uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read FLASH
{
/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
union
{
uint16_t Words[2];
uint32_t Long;
} CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
while (WordsRemaining--)
{
/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
}
/* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */
#if defined(RAMPZ)
Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
#else
Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
#endif
/* Adjust counters */
CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
}
/* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */
StartAddr = EndAddr;
}
else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM
{
while (BytesRemaining--)
{
/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
}
/* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr));
/* Adjust counters */
StartAddr++;
}
}
/* Return to idle state */
DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
}
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
/* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
break;
case DFU_GETSTATUS:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Write 8-bit status value */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_Status);
/* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(0);
/* Write 8-bit state value */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
/* Write 8-bit state string ID number */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
break;
case DFU_CLRSTATUS:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */
DFU_Status = OK;
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
break;
case DFU_GETSTATE:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Write the current device state to the endpoint */
Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
break;
case DFU_ABORT:
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */
DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
break;
}
}
/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to
* discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix.
*
* \param NumberOfBytes Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint
*/
static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes)
{
while (NumberOfBytes--)
{
if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
/* Wait until next data packet received */
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
}
Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
}
}
/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures
* that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the
* appropriate handler function.
*/
static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void)
{
/* Check if device is in secure mode */
if (IsSecure)
{
/* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */
if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE) &&
IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) ||
(SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ)))
{
/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
DFU_State = dfuERROR;
DFU_Status = errWRITE;
/* Stall command */
Endpoint_StallTransaction();
/* Don't process the command */
return;
}
}
/* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */
switch (SentCommand.Command)
{
case COMMAND_PROG_START:
ProcessMemProgCommand();
break;
case COMMAND_DISP_DATA:
ProcessMemReadCommand();
break;
case COMMAND_WRITE:
ProcessWriteCommand();
break;
case COMMAND_READ:
ProcessReadCommand();
break;
case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR:
if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00)) // Set 64KB flash page command
Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2];
break;
}
}
/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them
* in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables.
*/
static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void)
{
union
{
uint8_t Bytes[2];
uint16_t Word;
} Address[2] = {{Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}},
{Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}};
/* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */
StartAddr = Address[0].Word;
EndAddr = Address[1].Word;
}
/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed
* to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory.
*/
static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void)
{
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Write FLASH command
IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Write EEPROM command
{
/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
LoadStartEndAddresses();
/* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))
{
union
{
uint16_t Words[2];
uint32_t Long;
} CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
/* Erase the current page's temp buffer */
boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
}
/* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */
DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE;
}
}
/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed
* to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory
* blank check command.
*/
static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void)
{
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Read FLASH command
IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM command
{
/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
LoadStartEndAddresses();
/* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */
DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE;
}
else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank check FLASH command
{
uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
{
/* Check if the current byte is not blank */
#if defined(RAMPZ)
if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
#else
if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
#endif
{
/* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */
Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16);
StartAddr = CurrFlashAddress;
/* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */
DFU_State = dfuERROR;
DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED;
break;
}
CurrFlashAddress++;
}
}
}
/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as
* bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure.
*/
static void ProcessWriteCommand(void)
{
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03)) // Start application
{
/* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */
WaitForExit = true;
/* Check if empty request data array - an empty request after a filled request retains the
previous valid request data, but initializes the reset */
if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
{
if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00) // Start via watchdog
{
/* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */
wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
}
else // Start via jump
{
/* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */
union
{
uint8_t Bytes[2];
AppPtr_t FuncPtr;
} Address = {Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}};
AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr;
/* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */
RunBootloader = false;
}
}
}
else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) // Erase flash
{
uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
/* Clear the application section of flash */
while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
{
boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
}
/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */
boot_rww_enable();
/* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */
IsSecure = false;
}
}
/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval
* commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval.
*/
static void ProcessReadCommand(void)
{
const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2};
const uint8_t SignatureInfo[3] = {SIGNATURE_BYTE_1, SIGNATURE_BYTE_2, SIGNATURE_BYTE_3};
uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1];
if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read bootloader info
{
ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead];
}
else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Read signature byte
{
ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30];
}
}

199
Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for BootloaderDFU.c.
*/
#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_
#define _BOOTLOADER_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <avr/io.h>
#include <avr/wdt.h>
#include <avr/boot.h>
#include <avr/eeprom.h>
#include <stdbool.h>
#include "Descriptors.h"
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
/* Macros: */
/** Major bootloader version number. */
#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2
/** Minor bootloader version number. */
#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV 0
/** Complete bootloder version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the
* two individual bootloader version macros.
*/
#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV)
/** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1 0xDC
/** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2 0xFB
/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command.
*
* \param dataarr Command byte array to check against
* \param cb1 First command byte to check
*/
#define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1) (dataarr[0] == cb1)
/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command.
*
* \param dataarr Command byte array to check against
* \param cb1 First command byte to check
* \param cb2 Second command byte to check
*/
#define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == cb1) && (dataarr[1] == cb2))
/** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command.
* The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as
* a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded.
*/
#define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE 16
/** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command.
* Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded.
*/
#define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE 26
/** DFU class command request to detatch from the host. */
#define DFU_DETATCH 0x00
/** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */
#define DFU_DNLOAD 0x01
/** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */
#define DFU_UPLOAD 0x02
/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */
#define DFU_GETSTATUS 0x03
/** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */
#define DFU_CLRSTATUS 0x04
/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */
#define DFU_GETSTATE 0x05
/** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */
#define DFU_ABORT 0x06
/** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */
#define COMMAND_PROG_START 0x01
/** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */
#define COMMAND_DISP_DATA 0x03
/** DFU command to issue a write command. */
#define COMMAND_WRITE 0x04
/** DFU command to issue a read command. */
#define COMMAND_READ 0x05
/** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page
* that subsequent flash operations should use. */
#define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06
/* Type Defines: */
/** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */
typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
/** Type define for a strucuture containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */
typedef struct
{
uint8_t Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the COMMAND_* macro values */
uint8_t Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */
uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */
} DFU_Command_t;
/* Enums: */
/** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */
enum DFU_State_t
{
appIDLE = 0,
appDETACH = 1,
dfuIDLE = 2,
dfuDNLOAD_SYNC = 3,
dfuDNBUSY = 4,
dfuDNLOAD_IDLE = 5,
dfuMANIFEST_SYNC = 6,
dfuMANIFEST = 7,
dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET = 8,
dfuUPLOAD_IDLE = 9,
dfuERROR = 10
};
/** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */
enum DFU_Status_t
{
OK = 0,
errTARGET = 1,
errFILE = 2,
errWRITE = 3,
errERASE = 4,
errCHECK_ERASED = 5,
errPROG = 6,
errVERIFY = 7,
errADDRESS = 8,
errNOTDONE = 9,
errFIRMWARE = 10,
errVENDOR = 11,
errUSBR = 12,
errPOR = 13,
errUNKNOWN = 14,
errSTALLEDPKT = 15
};
/* Event Handlers: */
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
/* Function Prototypes: */
#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C)
static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes);
static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void);
static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void);
static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void);
static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void);
static void ProcessWriteCommand(void);
static void ProcessReadCommand(void);
#endif
#endif

52
Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
/** \file
*
* This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
* documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
*/
/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader
*
* This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming
* software to load firmware onto the AVR.
*
* This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP application. However, it requires the use of Atmel's
* DFU drivers. You will need to install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader.
*
* As an open-source option, this bootloader is also compatible with the Linux Atmel USB DFU Programmer
* software, available for download at http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/.
*
* If SECURE_MODE is defined as true, upon startup the bootloader will be locked, with only the chip erase
* function available (similar to Atmel's DFU bootloader). If SECURE_MODE is defined as false, all functions
* are usable on startup without the prerequisite firmware erase.
*
* Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and should fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
* you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
* values in the accompanying makefile.
*
* <b>NOTE:</b> This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader
* drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please
* manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly.
*
* <table>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
* <td>Device</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
* <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
* <td>None</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
* <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
* <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
* </tr>
* </table>
*/

181
Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
* computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
* the device's capabilities and functions.
*/
#include "Descriptors.h"
/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
* device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
* number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
* process begins.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
Class: 0x00,
SubClass: 0x00,
Protocol: 0x00,
Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
VendorID: 0x03EB,
ProductID: PRODUCT_ID_CODE,
ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ProductStrIndex: 0x01,
SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
NumberOfConfigurations: 1
};
/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
* of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
* and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
* a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
{
Config:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
TotalInterfaces: 1,
ConfigurationNumber: 1,
ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
},
DFUInterface:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
InterfaceNumber: 0,
AlternateSetting: 0,
TotalEndpoints: 0,
Class: 0xFE,
SubClass: 0x01,
Protocol: 0x02,
InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
},
DFUFunctional:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t), Type: DTYPE_DFUFunctional},
Attributes: (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD),
DetatchTimeout: 0x0000,
TransferSize: 0x0c00,
DFUSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.01)
}
};
/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
* the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
* via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
};
/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
* and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
* Descriptor.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: L"AVR DFU Bootloader"
};
/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
* documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
* to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
* is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
* USB host.
*/
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
{
const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
void* Address = NULL;
uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
switch (DescriptorType)
{
case DTYPE_Device:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
break;
case DTYPE_Configuration:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
break;
case DTYPE_String:
if (!(DescriptorNumber))
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
Size = LanguageString.Header.Size;
}
else
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
Size = ProductString.Header.Size;
}
break;
}
*DescriptorAddress = Address;
return Size;
}

166
Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for Descriptors.c.
*/
#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
/* Macros: */
/** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */
#define DTYPE_DFUFunctional 0x21
/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH
* command is issued, rather than the host issing a USB Reset.
*/
#define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH (1 << 3)
/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manefestation phase
* (memory programming phase).
*/
#define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT (1 << 2)
/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from
* the device to the host.
*/
#define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD (1 << 1)
/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from
* the host to the device.
*/
#define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD (1 << 0)
#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFA
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF7
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82
#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88
#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF4
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x87
#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF3
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94
#define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88
#else
#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
#endif
#if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE)
#error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader.
#endif
/* Type Defines: */
/** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information
* to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities.
*/
typedef struct
{
USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */
uint8_t Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the
* ATTR_* macros listed in this source file
*/
uint16_t DetatchTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH
* command being issued and the device detaching
* from the USB bus
*/
uint16_t TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept
* from the host in a transaction
*/
uint16_t DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU
* device complies with
*/
} USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t;
/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
* application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
* vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
*/
typedef struct
{
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DFUInterface;
USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t DFUFunctional;
} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
/* Function Prototypes: */
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
#endif

1485
Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
#
# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
# The format is:
# TAG = value [value, ...]
# For lists items can also be appended using:
# TAG += value [value, ...]
# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Project related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
# by quotes) that should identify the project.
PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader"
# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
# if some version control system is used.
PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
# Set to NO to disable this.
BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
"The $name widget" \
"The $name file" \
is \
provides \
specifies \
contains \
represents \
a \
an \
the
# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
# description.
ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
# path to strip.
STRIP_FROM_PATH =
# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
SHORT_NAMES = YES
# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
# re-implements.
INHERIT_DOCS = YES
# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
TAB_SIZE = 4
# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
ALIASES =
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
# of all members will be omitted, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
# scopes will look different, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Fortran.
OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
# VHDL.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
# enable parsing support.
CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
SIP_SUPPORT = NO
# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
# the \nosubgrouping command.
SUBGROUPING = YES
# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
# causing a significant performance penality.
# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Build related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
EXTRACT_ALL = YES
# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
# the interface are included in the documentation.
# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
# anonymous namespace are hidden.
EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
# documentation.
HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
# function's detailed documentation block.
HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
# of that file.
SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
INLINE_INFO = YES
# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
# the group names will appear in their defined order.
SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
# not including the namespace part.
# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
# alphabetical list.
SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
ENABLED_SECTIONS =
# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
# in the documentation. The default is NO.
SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_FILES = YES
# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
# of the layout file.
LAYOUT_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
QUIET = YES
# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
# NO is used.
WARNINGS = YES
# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
# automatically be disabled.
WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
# documentation.
WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
# to stderr.
WARN_LOGFILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the input files
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
# with spaces.
INPUT = ./
# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
# the list of possible encodings.
INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank the following patterns are tested:
# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
*.c \
*.txt
# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
# If left blank NO is used.
RECURSIVE = YES
# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
EXCLUDE =
# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
# from the input.
EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
# for example use the pattern */test/*
EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
# the \include command).
EXAMPLE_PATH =
# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank all files are included.
EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
# the \image command).
IMAGE_PATH =
# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
# ignored.
INPUT_FILTER =
# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
# is applied to all files.
FILTER_PATTERNS =
# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to source browsing
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
INLINE_SOURCES = NO
# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented
# functions referencing it will be listed.
REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented entities
# called/used by that function will be listed.
REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
USE_HTAGS = NO
# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
IGNORE_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the HTML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate HTML output.
GENERATE_HTML = YES
# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
HTML_OUTPUT = html
# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header.
HTML_HEADER =
# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard footer.
HTML_FOOTER =
# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
HTML_STYLESHEET =
# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
# NO a bullet list will be used.
HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
# it at startup.
# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
# can be grouped.
DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
# will append .docset to the name.
DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
# of the generated HTML documentation.
GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
# written to the html output directory.
CHM_FILE =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
HHC_LOCATION =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
GENERATE_CHI = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
# content.
CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
BINARY_TOC = NO
# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
TOC_EXPAND = YES
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
# HTML documentation.
GENERATE_QHP = NO
# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
QCH_FILE =
# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
# .qhp file .
QHG_LOCATION =
# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
# the value YES disables it.
DISABLE_INDEX = NO
# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
# respectively.
GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
# is shown.
TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
# to force them to be regenerated.
FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate Latex output.
GENERATE_LATEX = NO
# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
# default command name.
MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_LATEX = NO
# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
EXTRA_PACKAGES =
# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
LATEX_HEADER =
# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
# higher quality PDF documentation.
USE_PDFLATEX = YES
# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
# in the output.
LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the RTF output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
# other RTF readers or editors.
GENERATE_RTF = NO
# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_RTF = NO
# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
# programs which support those fields.
# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the man page output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate man pages
GENERATE_MAN = NO
# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
MAN_OUTPUT = man
# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
MAN_EXTENSION = .3
# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
MAN_LINKS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the XML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation.
GENERATE_XML = NO
# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
XML_OUTPUT = xml
# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_SCHEMA =
# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_DTD =
# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
# that captures the structure of the code including all
# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
# and incomplete at the moment.
GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the Perl module output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation. Note that this
# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
# moment.
GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
# and Perl will parse it just the same.
PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
# files.
ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
# the preprocessor.
INCLUDE_PATH =
# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
# be used.
INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
# instead of the = operator.
PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
# the parser if not removed.
SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to external references
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
# this location is as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
# does not have to be run to correct the links.
# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
# (where the name does NOT include the path)
# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
TAGFILES =
# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
GENERATE_TAGFILE =
# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
# will be listed.
ALLEXTERNALS = NO
# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
# be listed.
EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the dot tool
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
# powerful graphs.
CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
# default search path.
MSCGEN_PATH =
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
# or is not a class.
HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
HAVE_DOT = NO
# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
# containing the font.
DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
# The default size is 10pt.
DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
# can find it using this tag.
DOT_FONTPATH =
# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
CLASS_GRAPH = NO
# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
# Language.
UML_LOOK = NO
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
# relations between templates and their instances.
TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
# other documented files.
INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
# indirectly include this file.
INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
CALL_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
CALLER_GRAPH = NO
# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
# relations between the files in the directories.
DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
# If left blank png will be used.
DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
# \dotfile command).
DOTFILE_DIRS =
# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
# the various graphs.
DOT_CLEANUP = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
SEARCHENGINE = NO

714
Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,714 @@
# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
#
# Released to the Public Domain
#
# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
# Peter Fleury
# Tim Henigan
# Colin O'Flynn
# Reiner Patommel
# Markus Pfaff
# Sander Pool
# Frederik Rouleau
# Carlos Lamas
# Dean Camera
# Opendous Inc.
# Denver Gingerich
#
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# On command line:
#
# make all = Make software.
#
# make clean = Clean out built project files.
#
# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
#
# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
#
# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
#
# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
# have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
# have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
# DoxyGen installed)
#
# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
#
# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
#
# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
# bug reports to the GCC project.
#
# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# MCU name
MCU = at90usb1287
# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
# "Board" inside the application directory.
BOARD = USBKEY
# Processor frequency.
# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
# Typical values are:
# F_CPU = 1000000
# F_CPU = 1843200
# F_CPU = 2000000
# F_CPU = 3686400
# F_CPU = 4000000
# F_CPU = 7372800
# F_CPU = 8000000
# F_CPU = 11059200
# F_CPU = 14745600
# F_CPU = 16000000
# F_CPU = 18432000
# F_CPU = 20000000
F_CPU = 8000000
# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
FORMAT = ihex
# Target file name (without extension).
TARGET = BootloaderDFU
# Object files directory
# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
# this an empty or blank macro!
OBJDIR = .
# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
SRC = $(TARGET).c \
Descriptors.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
CPPSRC =
# List Assembler source files here.
# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
ASRC =
# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
OPT = s
# Debugging format.
# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
DEBUG = dwarf-2
# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../
# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
# c89 = "ANSI" C
# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
# Starting byte address of the bootloader
BOOT_START = 0x1E000
# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION
CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=32 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION
CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST
# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
CFLAGS += -fdata-sections
CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder
CFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
CPPFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns: create listing
# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
#---------------- Library Options ----------------
# Minimalistic printf version
PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
PRINTF_LIB =
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
# Minimalistic scanf version
SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
SCANF_LIB =
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
MATH_LIB = -lm
# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRALIBDIRS =
#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# only used for heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
EXTMEMOPTS =
#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
# -Map: create map file
# --cref: add cross reference to map file
LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
#
# Type: avrdude -c ?
# to get a full listing.
#
AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
# see avrdude manual.
#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
# performed after programming the device.
AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
# to submit bug reports.
#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
# DEBUG_UI = gdb
DEBUG_UI = insight
# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
# GDB Init Filename.
GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
DEBUG_PORT = 4242
# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
# avarice is running on a different computer.
DEBUG_HOST = localhost
#============================================================================
# Define programs and commands.
SHELL = sh
CC = avr-gcc
OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
SIZE = avr-size
AR = avr-ar rcs
NM = avr-nm
AVRDUDE = avrdude
REMOVE = rm -f
REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
COPY = cp
WINSHELL = cmd
# Define Messages
# English
MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
MSG_END = -------- end --------
MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
MSG_LINKING = Linking:
MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
# Define all object files.
OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
# Define all listing files.
LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
# Add target processor to flags.
ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
# Default target.
all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end
# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
build: elf hex eep lss sym
#build: lib
elf: $(TARGET).elf
hex: $(TARGET).hex
eep: $(TARGET).eep
lss: $(TARGET).lss
sym: $(TARGET).sym
LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
lib: $(LIBNAME)
# Eye candy.
# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
begin:
@echo
@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
end:
@echo $(MSG_END)
@echo
# Display size of file.
HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
sizebefore:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
sizeafter:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
checkhooks: build
@echo
@echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
@$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
echo "(None)"
@echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events -----
checklibmode:
@echo
@echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
@$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
| grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
|| echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
@echo ------------------------------------
# Display compiler version information.
gccversion :
@$(CC) --version
# Program the device.
program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
flip: $(TARGET).hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu: $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
# a breakpoint at main().
gdb-config:
@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
@echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
endif
@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
else
@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
endif
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
coff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
%.hex: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
%.eep: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
%.lss: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
%.sym: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
$(NM) -n $< > $@
# Create library from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.a: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.elf: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
# Compile: create object files from C source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
%.s : %.c
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
%.s : %.cpp
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
@echo
@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
%.i : %.c
$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Target: clean project.
clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
clean_binary:
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
clean_list:
@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
$(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
$(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
doxygen:
@echo Generating Project Documentation...
@doxygen Doxygen.conf
@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
clean_doxygen:
rm -rf Documentation
# Create object files directory
$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
# Include the dependency files.
-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
# Listing of phony targets.
.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \
finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \
gdb-config doxygen clean_doxygen

218
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
* computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
* the device's capabilities and functions.
*/
#include "Descriptors.h"
/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
* USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
* descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
* the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
* more details on HID report descriptors.
*/
USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
{
0x06, 0x9c, 0xff, /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined) */
0x09, 0x19, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */
0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Vendor Defined) */
0x0a, 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */
0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
0x95, 0x82, /* Report Count (130) */
0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
0x25, 0xff, /* Logical Maximum (255) */
0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
0xc0 /* End Collection */
};
/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
* device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
* number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
* process begins.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
Class: 0x00,
SubClass: 0x00,
Protocol: 0x00,
Endpoint0Size: 8,
VendorID: 0x16C0,
ProductID: 0x0478,
ReleaseNumber: 0x0010,
ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ProductStrIndex: 0x01,
SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
NumberOfConfigurations: 1
};
/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
* of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
* and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
* a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
*/
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
{
Config:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
TotalInterfaces: 1,
ConfigurationNumber: 1,
ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
},
Interface:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
InterfaceNumber: 0x00,
AlternateSetting: 0x00,
TotalEndpoints: 1,
Class: 0x03,
SubClass: 0x00,
Protocol: 0x00,
InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
},
HIDDescriptor:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
CountryCode: 0x00,
TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
HIDReportLength: sizeof(HIDReport)
},
HIDEndpoint:
{
Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_EPNUM),
Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE,
PollingIntervalMS: 0x40
},
};
/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
* the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
* via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
};
/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
* and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
* Descriptor.
*/
USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
{
Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(21), Type: DTYPE_String},
UnicodeString: L"AVR Teensy Bootloader"
};
/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
* documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
* to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
* is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
* USB host.
*/
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
{
const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
void* Address = NULL;
uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
switch (DescriptorType)
{
case DTYPE_Device:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
break;
case DTYPE_Configuration:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
break;
case DTYPE_String:
if (!(DescriptorNumber))
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
Size = LanguageString.Header.Size;
}
else
{
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
Size = ProductString.Header.Size;
}
break;
case DTYPE_HID:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.HIDDescriptor);
Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
break;
case DTYPE_Report:
Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(HIDReport);
Size = sizeof(HIDReport);
break;
}
*DescriptorAddress = Address;
return Size;
}

91
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for Descriptors.c.
*/
#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
/* Type Defines: */
/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
* specification for details on the structure elements.
*/
typedef struct
{
USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
uint16_t HIDSpec;
uint8_t CountryCode;
uint8_t TotalHIDReports;
uint8_t HIDReportType;
uint16_t HIDReportLength;
} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
* application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
* vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
*/
typedef struct
{
USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface;
USB_Descriptor_HID_t HIDDescriptor;
USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HIDEndpoint;
} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
/* Macros: */
/** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */
#define HID_EPNUM 1
/** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
#define HID_EPSIZE 64
/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
#define DTYPE_HID 0x21
/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
#define DTYPE_Report 0x22
/* Function Prototypes: */
uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
#endif

1485
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
#
# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
# The format is:
# TAG = value [value, ...]
# For lists items can also be appended using:
# TAG += value [value, ...]
# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Project related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
# by quotes) that should identify the project.
PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Teensy HID Bootloader"
# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
# if some version control system is used.
PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
# Set to NO to disable this.
BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
"The $name widget" \
"The $name file" \
is \
provides \
specifies \
contains \
represents \
a \
an \
the
# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
# description.
ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
# path to strip.
STRIP_FROM_PATH =
# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
SHORT_NAMES = YES
# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
# re-implements.
INHERIT_DOCS = YES
# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
TAB_SIZE = 4
# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
ALIASES =
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
# of all members will be omitted, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
# scopes will look different, etc.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
# Fortran.
OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
# VHDL.
OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
# enable parsing support.
CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
SIP_SUPPORT = NO
# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
# the \nosubgrouping command.
SUBGROUPING = YES
# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
# causing a significant performance penality.
# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Build related configuration options
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
EXTRACT_ALL = YES
# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
# will be included in the documentation.
EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
# the interface are included in the documentation.
# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
# anonymous namespace are hidden.
EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
# documentation.
HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
# function's detailed documentation block.
HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
# of that file.
SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
INLINE_INFO = YES
# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
# declaration order.
SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
# the group names will appear in their defined order.
SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
# not including the namespace part.
# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
# alphabetical list.
SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
# commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
ENABLED_SECTIONS =
# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
# in the documentation. The default is NO.
SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_FILES = YES
# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
# of the layout file.
LAYOUT_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
QUIET = YES
# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
# NO is used.
WARNINGS = YES
# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
# automatically be disabled.
WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
# documentation.
WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
# to stderr.
WARN_LOGFILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the input files
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
# with spaces.
INPUT = ./
# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
# the list of possible encodings.
INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank the following patterns are tested:
# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
*.c \
*.txt
# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
# If left blank NO is used.
RECURSIVE = YES
# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
EXCLUDE =
# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
# from the input.
EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
# for example use the pattern */test/*
EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
# the \include command).
EXAMPLE_PATH =
# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
# blank all files are included.
EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
# the \image command).
IMAGE_PATH =
# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
# ignored.
INPUT_FILTER =
# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
# is applied to all files.
FILTER_PATTERNS =
# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to source browsing
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
INLINE_SOURCES = NO
# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented
# functions referencing it will be listed.
REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
# then for each documented function all documented entities
# called/used by that function will be listed.
REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
USE_HTAGS = NO
# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
IGNORE_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the HTML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate HTML output.
GENERATE_HTML = YES
# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
HTML_OUTPUT = html
# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header.
HTML_HEADER =
# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard footer.
HTML_FOOTER =
# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
HTML_STYLESHEET =
# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
# NO a bullet list will be used.
HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
# it at startup.
# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
# can be grouped.
DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
# will append .docset to the name.
DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
# of the generated HTML documentation.
GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
# written to the html output directory.
CHM_FILE =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
HHC_LOCATION =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
GENERATE_CHI = NO
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
# content.
CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
BINARY_TOC = NO
# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
TOC_EXPAND = YES
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
# HTML documentation.
GENERATE_QHP = NO
# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
QCH_FILE =
# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
# .qhp file .
QHG_LOCATION =
# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
# the value YES disables it.
DISABLE_INDEX = NO
# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
# respectively.
GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
# is shown.
TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
# to force them to be regenerated.
FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate Latex output.
GENERATE_LATEX = NO
# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
# default command name.
MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_LATEX = NO
# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
EXTRA_PACKAGES =
# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
LATEX_HEADER =
# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
# higher quality PDF documentation.
USE_PDFLATEX = YES
# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
# in the output.
LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the RTF output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
# other RTF readers or editors.
GENERATE_RTF = NO
# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
# save some trees in general.
COMPACT_RTF = NO
# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
# programs which support those fields.
# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the man page output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate man pages
GENERATE_MAN = NO
# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
MAN_OUTPUT = man
# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
MAN_EXTENSION = .3
# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
MAN_LINKS = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the XML output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation.
GENERATE_XML = NO
# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
XML_OUTPUT = xml
# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_SCHEMA =
# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
# syntax of the XML files.
XML_DTD =
# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
# that captures the structure of the code including all
# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
# and incomplete at the moment.
GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# configuration options related to the Perl module output
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
# the code including all documentation. Note that this
# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
# moment.
GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
# and Perl will parse it just the same.
PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
# files.
ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
# the preprocessor.
INCLUDE_PATH =
# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
# be used.
INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
# instead of the = operator.
PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
# the parser if not removed.
SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to external references
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
# this location is as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
# does not have to be run to correct the links.
# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
# (where the name does NOT include the path)
# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
TAGFILES =
# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
GENERATE_TAGFILE =
# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
# will be listed.
ALLEXTERNALS = NO
# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
# be listed.
EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration options related to the dot tool
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
# powerful graphs.
CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
# default search path.
MSCGEN_PATH =
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
# or is not a class.
HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
HAVE_DOT = NO
# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
# containing the font.
DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
# The default size is 10pt.
DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
# can find it using this tag.
DOT_FONTPATH =
# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
CLASS_GRAPH = NO
# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
# Language.
UML_LOOK = NO
# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
# relations between templates and their instances.
TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
# other documented files.
INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
# indirectly include this file.
INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
CALL_GRAPH = NO
# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
CALLER_GRAPH = NO
# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
# relations between the files in the directories.
DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
# If left blank png will be used.
DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
# \dotfile command).
DOTFILE_DIRS =
# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
# the various graphs.
DOT_CLEANUP = YES
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
SEARCHENGINE = NO

156
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Main source file for the TeensyHID bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
*/
#define INCLUDE_FROM_TEENSYHID_C
#include "TeensyHID.h"
/* Global Variables: */
/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
* via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
* started via a forced watchdog reset.
*/
bool RunBootloader = true;
/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
* runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
*/
int main(void)
{
/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
wdt_disable();
/* Disable Clock Division */
SetSystemClockPrescaler(0);
/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
/* Initialize USB subsystem */
USB_Init();
while (RunBootloader)
USB_USBTask();
/* Shut down the USB interface, so that the host will register the disconnection */
USB_ShutDown();
/* Wait 100ms to give the host time to register the disconnection */
_delay_ms(100);
/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
for (;;);
}
/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
* to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
{
/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
}
/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
* control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
* all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
*/
EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
{
/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
switch (bRequest)
{
case REQ_SetReport:
if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
/* Wait until the command (report) has been sent by the host */
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
/* Read in the write destination address */
uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
/* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
if (PageAddress == TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION)
{
RunBootloader = false;
}
else
{
/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
boot_page_erase(PageAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
/* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < 128; PageByte += 2)
{
/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
{
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
}
/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
boot_page_fill(PageAddress + PageByte, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
}
/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
boot_page_write(PageAddress);
boot_spm_busy_wait();
/* Re-enable RWW section */
boot_rww_enable();
}
Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
/* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */
while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
/* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */
Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
}
break;
}
}

73
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
/*
LUFA Library
Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
www.fourwalledcubicle.com
*/
/*
Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this software.
*/
/** \file
*
* Header file for TeensyHID.c.
*/
#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_
#define _TEENSYHID_H_
/* Includes: */
#include <avr/io.h>
#include <avr/wdt.h>
#include <avr/boot.h>
#include <avr/wdt.h>
#include <util/delay.h>
#include <stdbool.h>
#include "Descriptors.h"
#include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
/* Preprocessor Checks: */
#if !defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
#error This bootloader is not compatible with the selected AVR model.
#endif
/* Macros: */
/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
#define REQ_SetReport 0x09
#define TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF
/* Event Handlers: */
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
#endif

41
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
/** \file
*
* This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
* documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
*/
/** \mainpage Teensy HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
*
* This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for Teensy compatible programming
* software to load firmware onto the AVR, such as the official software at http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/.
*
* Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB162, and will fit into 2KB of bootloader space.
*
* This spoofs (with permission) the offical Teensy bootloader's VID and PID, so that the software remains
* compatible with no changes.
*
* <table>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
* <td>Device</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
* <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
* <td>N/A</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
* <td>USBIF HID Class Standard</td>
* <td>Teensy Programming Protocol Details</td>
* </tr>
* <tr>
* <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
* <td>Low Speed Mode</td>
* <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
* </tr>
* </table>
*/

711
Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,711 @@
# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
#
# Released to the Public Domain
#
# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
# Peter Fleury
# Tim Henigan
# Colin O'Flynn
# Reiner Patommel
# Markus Pfaff
# Sander Pool
# Frederik Rouleau
# Carlos Lamas
# Dean Camera
# Opendous Inc.
# Denver Gingerich
#
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# On command line:
#
# make all = Make software.
#
# make clean = Clean out built project files.
#
# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
#
# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
#
# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
#
# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
# have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
# have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
#
# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
#
# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
# DoxyGen installed)
#
# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
#
# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
#
# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
# bug reports to the GCC project.
#
# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# MCU name
MCU = at90usb162
# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
# "Board" inside the application directory.
BOARD = USBKEY
# Processor frequency.
# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
# Typical values are:
# F_CPU = 1000000
# F_CPU = 1843200
# F_CPU = 2000000
# F_CPU = 3686400
# F_CPU = 4000000
# F_CPU = 7372800
# F_CPU = 8000000
# F_CPU = 11059200
# F_CPU = 14745600
# F_CPU = 16000000
# F_CPU = 18432000
# F_CPU = 20000000
F_CPU = 8000000
# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
FORMAT = ihex
# Target file name (without extension).
TARGET = TeensyHID
# Object files directory
# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
# this an empty or blank macro!
OBJDIR = .
# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
SRC = $(TARGET).c \
Descriptors.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
CPPSRC =
# List Assembler source files here.
# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
ASRC =
# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
OPT = s
# Debugging format.
# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
DEBUG = dwarf-2
# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../
# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
# c89 = "ANSI" C
# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
# Starting byte address of the bootloader
BOOT_START = 0xC000
# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION
CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION
CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST
# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition
CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions
CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder
CFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
# -g*: generate debugging information
# -O*: optimization level
# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
# -Wall...: warning level
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
CPPFLAGS += -Wall
CFLAGS += -Wundef
#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
# -adhlns: create listing
# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
#---------------- Library Options ----------------
# Minimalistic printf version
PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
PRINTF_LIB =
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
# Minimalistic scanf version
SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
SCANF_LIB =
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
MATH_LIB = -lm
# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
EXTRALIBDIRS =
#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
# only used for heap (malloc()).
#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
EXTMEMOPTS =
#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
# -Map: create map file
# --cref: add cross reference to map file
LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
#
# Type: avrdude -c ?
# to get a full listing.
#
AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
# see avrdude manual.
#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
# performed after programming the device.
#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
# to submit bug reports.
#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
# DEBUG_UI = gdb
DEBUG_UI = insight
# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
# GDB Init Filename.
GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
DEBUG_PORT = 4242
# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
# avarice is running on a different computer.
DEBUG_HOST = localhost
#============================================================================
# Define programs and commands.
SHELL = sh
CC = avr-gcc
OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
SIZE = avr-size
AR = avr-ar rcs
NM = avr-nm
AVRDUDE = avrdude
REMOVE = rm -f
REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
COPY = cp
WINSHELL = cmd
# Define Messages
# English
MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
MSG_END = -------- end --------
MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
MSG_LINKING = Linking:
MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
# Define all object files.
OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
# Define all listing files.
LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
# Add target processor to flags.
ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
# Default target.
all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end
# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
build: elf hex eep lss sym
#build: lib
elf: $(TARGET).elf
hex: $(TARGET).hex
eep: $(TARGET).eep
lss: $(TARGET).lss
sym: $(TARGET).sym
LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
lib: $(LIBNAME)
# Eye candy.
# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
begin:
@echo
@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
end:
@echo $(MSG_END)
@echo
# Display size of file.
HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
sizebefore:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
sizeafter:
@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
2>/dev/null; echo; fi
checkhooks: build
@echo
@echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
@$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
echo "(None)"
@echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events -----
checklibmode:
@echo
@echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
@$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
| grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
|| echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
@echo ------------------------------------
# Display compiler version information.
gccversion :
@$(CC) --version
# Program the device.
program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
flip: $(TARGET).hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu: $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep
dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
# a breakpoint at main().
gdb-config:
@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
@echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
endif
@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
else
@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
endif
@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
coff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
%.hex: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
%.eep: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
%.lss: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
%.sym: %.elf
@echo
@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
$(NM) -n $< > $@
# Create library from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.a: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
%.elf: $(OBJ)
@echo
@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
# Compile: create object files from C source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
@echo
@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
%.s : %.c
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
%.s : %.cpp
$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
@echo
@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
%.i : %.c
$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
# Target: clean project.
clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
clean_binary:
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
clean_list:
@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
doxygen:
@echo Generating Project Documentation...
@doxygen Doxygen.conf
@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
clean_doxygen:
rm -rf Documentation
# Create object files directory
$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
# Include the dependency files.
-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
# Listing of phony targets.
.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \
finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \
gdb-config doxygen

29
Bootloaders/makefile
Unescape View File

@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
#
# LUFA Library
# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
#
# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
# www.fourwalledcubicle.com
#
# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to
# rebuild all bootloaders.
# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
# code.
all:
make -C 'DFU/' clean
make -C 'DFU/' all
make -C 'CDC/' clean
make -C 'CDC/' all
make -C 'TeensyHID/' clean
make -C 'TeensyHID/' all
%:
make -C 'DFU/' $@
make -C 'CDC/' $@
make -C 'TeensyHID/' $@
Write Preview
Loading…
Cancel
Save